WIPC402 IP Camera User ManualWIPC409HD+IP...IP Camera through PC-1. You must first change the IP...
44
WIPC409HD WIRELESS N PAN/TILT HIGH DEFINITION IP CAMERA V2.0
Transcript of WIPC402 IP Camera User ManualWIPC409HD+IP...IP Camera through PC-1. You must first change the IP...
WIPC409HD WIRELESS N PANTILT
HIGH DEFINITION IP CAMERA
V20
2
User Manual
copy Copyright 2014 All rights reserved Ver11
No part of this document may be reproduced republished or retransmitted in any
form or by any means whatsoever whether electronically or mechanically including
but not limited to by way of photocopying recording information recording or
through retrieval systems without the express written permission We reserve the right
to revise this document at any time without the obligation to notify any person
andor entity All other company or product names mentioned are used for
identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective owners
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND DAMAGES
THE PRODUCT AND THE SOFTWARES WITHIN ARE PROVIDED AS IS BASIS THE
MANUFACTURER AND MANUFACTURERrsquoS RESELLERS (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS
ldquoTHE SELLERSrdquo) DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ANY WARRANTIES
ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING COURSE OF PERFORMANCE OR USAGE OF
TRADE IN NO EVENT WILL THE SELLERS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OR LOSS INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL WILLFUL PUNITIVE INCIDENTAL
EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS
PROFITS OR DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS OF ANY CUSTOMER OR ANY THIRD
PARTY ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR THE
SOFTWARES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE RESULTING FROM DEFECTS IN THE
PRODUCT OR SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION OR LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA
OF ANY KIND WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY
EVEN IF THE PARTIES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS
SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY CUSTOMER BECAUSE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABLITY FOR DAMAGES THE ABOV E LIMITATION MAY
NOT APPLY TO THE PARTIES IN NO EVENT WILL THE SELLERSrsquo TOTAL CUMULATIVE
LIABILITY OF EACH AND EVERY KIND IN RELATION TO THE PRODUCT OR ITS SOFTWARE
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY CUSTOMER FOR THE PRODUCT
3
User Manual
Table of Contents
About the Product 5
Function and Features 6
Appearance and Interface 7
Appearance 7
Interfaces of the WIPC409HD 7
LAN Port LED Behaviors 8
Network Connection 8
Connection Instructions 9
Visiting the IP Camera 9
Visit IP Camera from LAN 10
Set IP Address 10
Visit IP Camera 11
Web User Interface 12
Menu 12
Video Displaying Area 13
Browse SD Card 13
Capture 14
Record 14
Playback 14
The PanTilt Control 14
Notice (for Initial Use) 15
Visit IP Camera from WAN 16
Port Forwarding 16
DDNS 17
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name 17
Third Party Domain Name 18
Other Settings 19
Video Settings Page 19
Video Settings 19
Audio Settings 19
Image Settings 20
4
User Manual
Network Setting Page 20
Basic Network Setting 20
WIFI Setting 21
Remote Access Setting 21
Alarm Setting Page 22
External Alarm Input 22
Motion Detection Setting 22
Alarm Mode Setting 23
Alarm Time Setting Schedule 23
Advance Setting 25
User Management 25
Auto Capture Setting 26
FTP Setting 26
E-mail Setting 27
System Setting Page 27
Device Information Checking 27
Date and Time Setting 28
Default Setting 28
System Log Checking 29
Advanced Application 30
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up 30
Mobile Phone Browsing 30
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device 31
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS) 32
Technical Parameters 33
Supplementary Section 35
Port Forwarding References 35
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2) 35
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S) 36
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME) 37
Linksys E1500 Router 38
DLink DVG-N5402SP 39
2wire 2700 HGV-2 40
5
User Manual
About the Product
The IP Camera combines a high quality digital video camera with network
connectivity and a powerful web server to bring clear videos to your mobile
phonedesktop from anywhere on your local network or over the Internet
Your IP Camera package should contain the following items If any of the listed items
are missing please contact your reseller from where you purchased the camera for
assistance
The Package includes
WIPC409HD
Resource CD Utility with
User Manual
5V Power Adapter
Easy Start Guide
LAN Cable
Wireless Antenna
Mounting Bracket
Warranty Policy
6
User Manual
Function and Features
Experience Real-Time HD monitoring anytime you need it and anywhere you are with
your smartphonersquos 3G4GWi-Fi connection through the WIPC409HDrsquos Aztech IP Cam
app a smartphone app that you can easily download on Google Play or Apple App
Store which enables you to quickly setup the WIPC409HD control the PanTiltZoom
feature of the camera and view Real-time High-definition videos and images
captured by this excellent companion
Enjoy High-Definition Monitoring To help you with your monitoring needs Aztech
WIPC409HD includes effective High-Definition video and audio recording which
allows you to view capture scenes and record video feeds with all the quality you
need
Perfectly Built for Reliability Capable of providing round the clock surveillance
WIPC409HD enables you to continuously monitor your most treasured possessions
or even your loved ones for as long as you want It is equipped with an alarm
notification which collaborates with its motion detector to identify movements
within its monitored area while sending email notifications upon detecting
movements with an attached scene-screenshot
View it Anytime Anywhere you are Anywhere you are anytime you want as long
as you have an active 3G4GWi-Fi wireless connection in your wireless device
(eg smartphones tablets laptops) controlling the WIPC409HDrsquos view and
area-viewing is now made possible
Easy 3-Step Setup Aztech WIPC409HD involves a simplified 3-step setup in setting
up the surveillance with your smartphones a feature made possible through the
Aztech IP Cam app downloadable through Apple App Store and Google Play
Enhanced Accessibility With the Aztech IP Cam app let the monitored area hear
what you have to say with its built-in speakers designed to broadcast sounds sent
by the Aztech IP Cam app You may now also easily connect your WIPC409HD to
your WPS enabled router through a simple press of the WPS button on both
devices
Pan-Tilt-Zoom Feature Compared to conventional Fixed IP Cameras which only
focuses on a single area the WIPC409HD allows you to follow movements and
capture various scenes taken from multiple angles with its 355deg horizontal and 120deg
vertical pan and tilt function which can be flexibly combined with its zoom
capabilities for the ultimate monitoring experience
7
User Manual
Appearance and Interface
Appearance
Interfaces of the WIPC409HD
1 5V DC Power Input Allows you to connect the Power Adapter Its output
should be 5V in as seen on its specifications
2 WPS Button Press this button for 2 seconds to enable the WPS connectivity of
the WIPC409HD to a wireless router that has a WPS feature You may have to
browse your routerrsquos instruction manual to know how many seconds it has to
be pressed for a successful WPS pairing
3 Ethernet Port The WIPC409HD uses a Self-adaptive Ethernet port The camera
is capable of connecting to all kinds of network devices such as hub router
switch etc
4 SD Card Slot Capable of supporting a 32G SDTF card for storing the alarm
video pictures timing snapshot and recording
5 External Mic Audio input socket is designed for connecting external
microphone or line-in audio signal Please refer to 712 and select right
settings
6 External Speaker Audio output socket is for line-out audio player such as
headphones speakers etc
8
User Manual
LAN Port LED Behaviors
Network Connection
The IP Camera can be connected to another PC by connecting it to a router a
switch or a hub to establish network connectivity as seen above
LABEL STATE DESCRIPTION
LED 1 Blinking
OFF
Actively transmittingreceiving data
Device is not connected to the network
LED 2 Steady
OFF
A LAN Cable is connected to the LAN port
There is no LAN cable connected to the LAN Port
9
User Manual
Connection Instructions
Before visiting the IP Camera you must first connect it to the Network Plug it to
a power outlet and check if the light of the LAN port is normal to make sure all
of the communication links are functioning properly The connection method
can be seen on the previous page In addition ensure that the following items
below are satisfied
1 IP Camera-1 and IP Camera-2 are connected separately to 2 different
LANs
2 And these 2 LANs are already connected to the Internet In order to get the
LANs connected to the Internet ensure that the router used in the network
has an active internet connection
3 PC-3 is connected to the Internet
Visiting the IP Camera
To visit the IP Camera you must first configure some of your IP Camerarsquos IP
settings
1 The PC and IP Camera are in the same LAN If you want to use this PC to visit
the IP Camera you need to make sure that each devicersquos IP address
belongs to the same segment Otherwise you may have to reset the IP
Camerarsquos IP address
For example if the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address in the image above is
1921681139 (at the segment of 1921681x) while the PC-1rsquos IP address is
1921680175 (at the segment of 1921680x) you will not be able to visit the
IP Camera through PC-1 You must first change the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address
to 1921680139 (or any IP address within the 19216801 to 1921680254
except 1921680175)
2 The PC and IP Camera are in different LANs but they are all connected to
Internet For the IP Camera-1 and PC-2 if you want to visit IP Camera-1
through PC-2 you must first ensure the following
Ensure that you can visit IP Camera-1 through PC-1 and then do port
forwarding of the IP Camera on Router-1
The PC-2rsquos visit application could be sent through router-1 to IP
Camera-1 Normally PC-2 could only send the information to router-1
However if you do not configure the port forwarding settings of the IP
Camera-1 on router-1 PC-2 would not be able to visit IP Camera-1
10
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from LAN
Set IP Address
The IP addresses of each IP Camera and PC should be on the same segment or
IP range As explained earlier you would not be able to access IP Camera-1
To change the IP address of IP Camera-1
1 Run the WIPC409HD Utility in the CD
2 Click Find button and then select the IP Camera on the Equipments list to set
the IP Camerarsquos IP address
Additional Notes
If a firewall is enabled in your PC a popup window will ask for your
confirmation if you would be blocking or allowing the software to run
Click Allow to proceed
IP Cameras by default use a dynamic IP Address and an HTTP port 8081 If
you do not have this software you could also press down the reset
button of the IP Camera (found at the bottom of the camera) to reset it
to its default factory settings You can then use the default IP address to
visit the IP Camera
If you wish to access the camera remotely using a camerarsquos External
Access address simply
a Select the camera that you want to access remotely on the
Equipments list
b Click the Get button (beside the External Access field)
11
User Manual
c On the Validate Authentication window enter admin as its
username and password
d Copy the URL generated on the External Access field This
link would allow you to access the camera even when not
on the same LAN Network
e You may also do steps a to d on your other IP cameras
Setup Instructions
1 Click the Find button and select the WIPC409HD camera from the Equipment
list seen on the left side of the utility The required fields on the General tab
would automatically be filled up by the selected camerarsquos device details
2 Click the Open button beside the Internal Access field and you will
automatically be redirected to the Web User Interface of your WIPC409HD
Visit IP Camera
If you are using Internet Explorer or a compatible browser to access the camera
for the first time you will be required to install ActiveX before viewing the video
For first time visits please click the Download ActiveX link
A dialog box as seen below will popup Click Run and it will automatically
download and install the ActiveX plugin
12
User Manual
After the ActiveX installation you will be redirected to the Home page of your IP
Camera Simply click View to start viewing
Web User Interface
Menu
There are 2 kinds of menu (1) is Main Menu and (2) is the Sub Menu The Main
Menu lies at the top of the interface including View Media Network Alarm
Advanced and System The Sub Menu lies on the right side of the Web User
Interface displaying different options for each main menu
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
2
User Manual
copy Copyright 2014 All rights reserved Ver11
No part of this document may be reproduced republished or retransmitted in any
form or by any means whatsoever whether electronically or mechanically including
but not limited to by way of photocopying recording information recording or
through retrieval systems without the express written permission We reserve the right
to revise this document at any time without the obligation to notify any person
andor entity All other company or product names mentioned are used for
identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective owners
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND DAMAGES
THE PRODUCT AND THE SOFTWARES WITHIN ARE PROVIDED AS IS BASIS THE
MANUFACTURER AND MANUFACTURERrsquoS RESELLERS (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS
ldquoTHE SELLERSrdquo) DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ANY WARRANTIES
ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING COURSE OF PERFORMANCE OR USAGE OF
TRADE IN NO EVENT WILL THE SELLERS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OR LOSS INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL WILLFUL PUNITIVE INCIDENTAL
EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS
PROFITS OR DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS OF ANY CUSTOMER OR ANY THIRD
PARTY ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR THE
SOFTWARES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE RESULTING FROM DEFECTS IN THE
PRODUCT OR SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION OR LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA
OF ANY KIND WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY
EVEN IF THE PARTIES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS
SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY CUSTOMER BECAUSE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABLITY FOR DAMAGES THE ABOV E LIMITATION MAY
NOT APPLY TO THE PARTIES IN NO EVENT WILL THE SELLERSrsquo TOTAL CUMULATIVE
LIABILITY OF EACH AND EVERY KIND IN RELATION TO THE PRODUCT OR ITS SOFTWARE
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY CUSTOMER FOR THE PRODUCT
3
User Manual
Table of Contents
About the Product 5
Function and Features 6
Appearance and Interface 7
Appearance 7
Interfaces of the WIPC409HD 7
LAN Port LED Behaviors 8
Network Connection 8
Connection Instructions 9
Visiting the IP Camera 9
Visit IP Camera from LAN 10
Set IP Address 10
Visit IP Camera 11
Web User Interface 12
Menu 12
Video Displaying Area 13
Browse SD Card 13
Capture 14
Record 14
Playback 14
The PanTilt Control 14
Notice (for Initial Use) 15
Visit IP Camera from WAN 16
Port Forwarding 16
DDNS 17
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name 17
Third Party Domain Name 18
Other Settings 19
Video Settings Page 19
Video Settings 19
Audio Settings 19
Image Settings 20
4
User Manual
Network Setting Page 20
Basic Network Setting 20
WIFI Setting 21
Remote Access Setting 21
Alarm Setting Page 22
External Alarm Input 22
Motion Detection Setting 22
Alarm Mode Setting 23
Alarm Time Setting Schedule 23
Advance Setting 25
User Management 25
Auto Capture Setting 26
FTP Setting 26
E-mail Setting 27
System Setting Page 27
Device Information Checking 27
Date and Time Setting 28
Default Setting 28
System Log Checking 29
Advanced Application 30
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up 30
Mobile Phone Browsing 30
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device 31
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS) 32
Technical Parameters 33
Supplementary Section 35
Port Forwarding References 35
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2) 35
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S) 36
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME) 37
Linksys E1500 Router 38
DLink DVG-N5402SP 39
2wire 2700 HGV-2 40
5
User Manual
About the Product
The IP Camera combines a high quality digital video camera with network
connectivity and a powerful web server to bring clear videos to your mobile
phonedesktop from anywhere on your local network or over the Internet
Your IP Camera package should contain the following items If any of the listed items
are missing please contact your reseller from where you purchased the camera for
assistance
The Package includes
WIPC409HD
Resource CD Utility with
User Manual
5V Power Adapter
Easy Start Guide
LAN Cable
Wireless Antenna
Mounting Bracket
Warranty Policy
6
User Manual
Function and Features
Experience Real-Time HD monitoring anytime you need it and anywhere you are with
your smartphonersquos 3G4GWi-Fi connection through the WIPC409HDrsquos Aztech IP Cam
app a smartphone app that you can easily download on Google Play or Apple App
Store which enables you to quickly setup the WIPC409HD control the PanTiltZoom
feature of the camera and view Real-time High-definition videos and images
captured by this excellent companion
Enjoy High-Definition Monitoring To help you with your monitoring needs Aztech
WIPC409HD includes effective High-Definition video and audio recording which
allows you to view capture scenes and record video feeds with all the quality you
need
Perfectly Built for Reliability Capable of providing round the clock surveillance
WIPC409HD enables you to continuously monitor your most treasured possessions
or even your loved ones for as long as you want It is equipped with an alarm
notification which collaborates with its motion detector to identify movements
within its monitored area while sending email notifications upon detecting
movements with an attached scene-screenshot
View it Anytime Anywhere you are Anywhere you are anytime you want as long
as you have an active 3G4GWi-Fi wireless connection in your wireless device
(eg smartphones tablets laptops) controlling the WIPC409HDrsquos view and
area-viewing is now made possible
Easy 3-Step Setup Aztech WIPC409HD involves a simplified 3-step setup in setting
up the surveillance with your smartphones a feature made possible through the
Aztech IP Cam app downloadable through Apple App Store and Google Play
Enhanced Accessibility With the Aztech IP Cam app let the monitored area hear
what you have to say with its built-in speakers designed to broadcast sounds sent
by the Aztech IP Cam app You may now also easily connect your WIPC409HD to
your WPS enabled router through a simple press of the WPS button on both
devices
Pan-Tilt-Zoom Feature Compared to conventional Fixed IP Cameras which only
focuses on a single area the WIPC409HD allows you to follow movements and
capture various scenes taken from multiple angles with its 355deg horizontal and 120deg
vertical pan and tilt function which can be flexibly combined with its zoom
capabilities for the ultimate monitoring experience
7
User Manual
Appearance and Interface
Appearance
Interfaces of the WIPC409HD
1 5V DC Power Input Allows you to connect the Power Adapter Its output
should be 5V in as seen on its specifications
2 WPS Button Press this button for 2 seconds to enable the WPS connectivity of
the WIPC409HD to a wireless router that has a WPS feature You may have to
browse your routerrsquos instruction manual to know how many seconds it has to
be pressed for a successful WPS pairing
3 Ethernet Port The WIPC409HD uses a Self-adaptive Ethernet port The camera
is capable of connecting to all kinds of network devices such as hub router
switch etc
4 SD Card Slot Capable of supporting a 32G SDTF card for storing the alarm
video pictures timing snapshot and recording
5 External Mic Audio input socket is designed for connecting external
microphone or line-in audio signal Please refer to 712 and select right
settings
6 External Speaker Audio output socket is for line-out audio player such as
headphones speakers etc
8
User Manual
LAN Port LED Behaviors
Network Connection
The IP Camera can be connected to another PC by connecting it to a router a
switch or a hub to establish network connectivity as seen above
LABEL STATE DESCRIPTION
LED 1 Blinking
OFF
Actively transmittingreceiving data
Device is not connected to the network
LED 2 Steady
OFF
A LAN Cable is connected to the LAN port
There is no LAN cable connected to the LAN Port
9
User Manual
Connection Instructions
Before visiting the IP Camera you must first connect it to the Network Plug it to
a power outlet and check if the light of the LAN port is normal to make sure all
of the communication links are functioning properly The connection method
can be seen on the previous page In addition ensure that the following items
below are satisfied
1 IP Camera-1 and IP Camera-2 are connected separately to 2 different
LANs
2 And these 2 LANs are already connected to the Internet In order to get the
LANs connected to the Internet ensure that the router used in the network
has an active internet connection
3 PC-3 is connected to the Internet
Visiting the IP Camera
To visit the IP Camera you must first configure some of your IP Camerarsquos IP
settings
1 The PC and IP Camera are in the same LAN If you want to use this PC to visit
the IP Camera you need to make sure that each devicersquos IP address
belongs to the same segment Otherwise you may have to reset the IP
Camerarsquos IP address
For example if the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address in the image above is
1921681139 (at the segment of 1921681x) while the PC-1rsquos IP address is
1921680175 (at the segment of 1921680x) you will not be able to visit the
IP Camera through PC-1 You must first change the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address
to 1921680139 (or any IP address within the 19216801 to 1921680254
except 1921680175)
2 The PC and IP Camera are in different LANs but they are all connected to
Internet For the IP Camera-1 and PC-2 if you want to visit IP Camera-1
through PC-2 you must first ensure the following
Ensure that you can visit IP Camera-1 through PC-1 and then do port
forwarding of the IP Camera on Router-1
The PC-2rsquos visit application could be sent through router-1 to IP
Camera-1 Normally PC-2 could only send the information to router-1
However if you do not configure the port forwarding settings of the IP
Camera-1 on router-1 PC-2 would not be able to visit IP Camera-1
10
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from LAN
Set IP Address
The IP addresses of each IP Camera and PC should be on the same segment or
IP range As explained earlier you would not be able to access IP Camera-1
To change the IP address of IP Camera-1
1 Run the WIPC409HD Utility in the CD
2 Click Find button and then select the IP Camera on the Equipments list to set
the IP Camerarsquos IP address
Additional Notes
If a firewall is enabled in your PC a popup window will ask for your
confirmation if you would be blocking or allowing the software to run
Click Allow to proceed
IP Cameras by default use a dynamic IP Address and an HTTP port 8081 If
you do not have this software you could also press down the reset
button of the IP Camera (found at the bottom of the camera) to reset it
to its default factory settings You can then use the default IP address to
visit the IP Camera
If you wish to access the camera remotely using a camerarsquos External
Access address simply
a Select the camera that you want to access remotely on the
Equipments list
b Click the Get button (beside the External Access field)
11
User Manual
c On the Validate Authentication window enter admin as its
username and password
d Copy the URL generated on the External Access field This
link would allow you to access the camera even when not
on the same LAN Network
e You may also do steps a to d on your other IP cameras
Setup Instructions
1 Click the Find button and select the WIPC409HD camera from the Equipment
list seen on the left side of the utility The required fields on the General tab
would automatically be filled up by the selected camerarsquos device details
2 Click the Open button beside the Internal Access field and you will
automatically be redirected to the Web User Interface of your WIPC409HD
Visit IP Camera
If you are using Internet Explorer or a compatible browser to access the camera
for the first time you will be required to install ActiveX before viewing the video
For first time visits please click the Download ActiveX link
A dialog box as seen below will popup Click Run and it will automatically
download and install the ActiveX plugin
12
User Manual
After the ActiveX installation you will be redirected to the Home page of your IP
Camera Simply click View to start viewing
Web User Interface
Menu
There are 2 kinds of menu (1) is Main Menu and (2) is the Sub Menu The Main
Menu lies at the top of the interface including View Media Network Alarm
Advanced and System The Sub Menu lies on the right side of the Web User
Interface displaying different options for each main menu
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
3
User Manual
Table of Contents
About the Product 5
Function and Features 6
Appearance and Interface 7
Appearance 7
Interfaces of the WIPC409HD 7
LAN Port LED Behaviors 8
Network Connection 8
Connection Instructions 9
Visiting the IP Camera 9
Visit IP Camera from LAN 10
Set IP Address 10
Visit IP Camera 11
Web User Interface 12
Menu 12
Video Displaying Area 13
Browse SD Card 13
Capture 14
Record 14
Playback 14
The PanTilt Control 14
Notice (for Initial Use) 15
Visit IP Camera from WAN 16
Port Forwarding 16
DDNS 17
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name 17
Third Party Domain Name 18
Other Settings 19
Video Settings Page 19
Video Settings 19
Audio Settings 19
Image Settings 20
4
User Manual
Network Setting Page 20
Basic Network Setting 20
WIFI Setting 21
Remote Access Setting 21
Alarm Setting Page 22
External Alarm Input 22
Motion Detection Setting 22
Alarm Mode Setting 23
Alarm Time Setting Schedule 23
Advance Setting 25
User Management 25
Auto Capture Setting 26
FTP Setting 26
E-mail Setting 27
System Setting Page 27
Device Information Checking 27
Date and Time Setting 28
Default Setting 28
System Log Checking 29
Advanced Application 30
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up 30
Mobile Phone Browsing 30
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device 31
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS) 32
Technical Parameters 33
Supplementary Section 35
Port Forwarding References 35
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2) 35
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S) 36
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME) 37
Linksys E1500 Router 38
DLink DVG-N5402SP 39
2wire 2700 HGV-2 40
5
User Manual
About the Product
The IP Camera combines a high quality digital video camera with network
connectivity and a powerful web server to bring clear videos to your mobile
phonedesktop from anywhere on your local network or over the Internet
Your IP Camera package should contain the following items If any of the listed items
are missing please contact your reseller from where you purchased the camera for
assistance
The Package includes
WIPC409HD
Resource CD Utility with
User Manual
5V Power Adapter
Easy Start Guide
LAN Cable
Wireless Antenna
Mounting Bracket
Warranty Policy
6
User Manual
Function and Features
Experience Real-Time HD monitoring anytime you need it and anywhere you are with
your smartphonersquos 3G4GWi-Fi connection through the WIPC409HDrsquos Aztech IP Cam
app a smartphone app that you can easily download on Google Play or Apple App
Store which enables you to quickly setup the WIPC409HD control the PanTiltZoom
feature of the camera and view Real-time High-definition videos and images
captured by this excellent companion
Enjoy High-Definition Monitoring To help you with your monitoring needs Aztech
WIPC409HD includes effective High-Definition video and audio recording which
allows you to view capture scenes and record video feeds with all the quality you
need
Perfectly Built for Reliability Capable of providing round the clock surveillance
WIPC409HD enables you to continuously monitor your most treasured possessions
or even your loved ones for as long as you want It is equipped with an alarm
notification which collaborates with its motion detector to identify movements
within its monitored area while sending email notifications upon detecting
movements with an attached scene-screenshot
View it Anytime Anywhere you are Anywhere you are anytime you want as long
as you have an active 3G4GWi-Fi wireless connection in your wireless device
(eg smartphones tablets laptops) controlling the WIPC409HDrsquos view and
area-viewing is now made possible
Easy 3-Step Setup Aztech WIPC409HD involves a simplified 3-step setup in setting
up the surveillance with your smartphones a feature made possible through the
Aztech IP Cam app downloadable through Apple App Store and Google Play
Enhanced Accessibility With the Aztech IP Cam app let the monitored area hear
what you have to say with its built-in speakers designed to broadcast sounds sent
by the Aztech IP Cam app You may now also easily connect your WIPC409HD to
your WPS enabled router through a simple press of the WPS button on both
devices
Pan-Tilt-Zoom Feature Compared to conventional Fixed IP Cameras which only
focuses on a single area the WIPC409HD allows you to follow movements and
capture various scenes taken from multiple angles with its 355deg horizontal and 120deg
vertical pan and tilt function which can be flexibly combined with its zoom
capabilities for the ultimate monitoring experience
7
User Manual
Appearance and Interface
Appearance
Interfaces of the WIPC409HD
1 5V DC Power Input Allows you to connect the Power Adapter Its output
should be 5V in as seen on its specifications
2 WPS Button Press this button for 2 seconds to enable the WPS connectivity of
the WIPC409HD to a wireless router that has a WPS feature You may have to
browse your routerrsquos instruction manual to know how many seconds it has to
be pressed for a successful WPS pairing
3 Ethernet Port The WIPC409HD uses a Self-adaptive Ethernet port The camera
is capable of connecting to all kinds of network devices such as hub router
switch etc
4 SD Card Slot Capable of supporting a 32G SDTF card for storing the alarm
video pictures timing snapshot and recording
5 External Mic Audio input socket is designed for connecting external
microphone or line-in audio signal Please refer to 712 and select right
settings
6 External Speaker Audio output socket is for line-out audio player such as
headphones speakers etc
8
User Manual
LAN Port LED Behaviors
Network Connection
The IP Camera can be connected to another PC by connecting it to a router a
switch or a hub to establish network connectivity as seen above
LABEL STATE DESCRIPTION
LED 1 Blinking
OFF
Actively transmittingreceiving data
Device is not connected to the network
LED 2 Steady
OFF
A LAN Cable is connected to the LAN port
There is no LAN cable connected to the LAN Port
9
User Manual
Connection Instructions
Before visiting the IP Camera you must first connect it to the Network Plug it to
a power outlet and check if the light of the LAN port is normal to make sure all
of the communication links are functioning properly The connection method
can be seen on the previous page In addition ensure that the following items
below are satisfied
1 IP Camera-1 and IP Camera-2 are connected separately to 2 different
LANs
2 And these 2 LANs are already connected to the Internet In order to get the
LANs connected to the Internet ensure that the router used in the network
has an active internet connection
3 PC-3 is connected to the Internet
Visiting the IP Camera
To visit the IP Camera you must first configure some of your IP Camerarsquos IP
settings
1 The PC and IP Camera are in the same LAN If you want to use this PC to visit
the IP Camera you need to make sure that each devicersquos IP address
belongs to the same segment Otherwise you may have to reset the IP
Camerarsquos IP address
For example if the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address in the image above is
1921681139 (at the segment of 1921681x) while the PC-1rsquos IP address is
1921680175 (at the segment of 1921680x) you will not be able to visit the
IP Camera through PC-1 You must first change the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address
to 1921680139 (or any IP address within the 19216801 to 1921680254
except 1921680175)
2 The PC and IP Camera are in different LANs but they are all connected to
Internet For the IP Camera-1 and PC-2 if you want to visit IP Camera-1
through PC-2 you must first ensure the following
Ensure that you can visit IP Camera-1 through PC-1 and then do port
forwarding of the IP Camera on Router-1
The PC-2rsquos visit application could be sent through router-1 to IP
Camera-1 Normally PC-2 could only send the information to router-1
However if you do not configure the port forwarding settings of the IP
Camera-1 on router-1 PC-2 would not be able to visit IP Camera-1
10
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from LAN
Set IP Address
The IP addresses of each IP Camera and PC should be on the same segment or
IP range As explained earlier you would not be able to access IP Camera-1
To change the IP address of IP Camera-1
1 Run the WIPC409HD Utility in the CD
2 Click Find button and then select the IP Camera on the Equipments list to set
the IP Camerarsquos IP address
Additional Notes
If a firewall is enabled in your PC a popup window will ask for your
confirmation if you would be blocking or allowing the software to run
Click Allow to proceed
IP Cameras by default use a dynamic IP Address and an HTTP port 8081 If
you do not have this software you could also press down the reset
button of the IP Camera (found at the bottom of the camera) to reset it
to its default factory settings You can then use the default IP address to
visit the IP Camera
If you wish to access the camera remotely using a camerarsquos External
Access address simply
a Select the camera that you want to access remotely on the
Equipments list
b Click the Get button (beside the External Access field)
11
User Manual
c On the Validate Authentication window enter admin as its
username and password
d Copy the URL generated on the External Access field This
link would allow you to access the camera even when not
on the same LAN Network
e You may also do steps a to d on your other IP cameras
Setup Instructions
1 Click the Find button and select the WIPC409HD camera from the Equipment
list seen on the left side of the utility The required fields on the General tab
would automatically be filled up by the selected camerarsquos device details
2 Click the Open button beside the Internal Access field and you will
automatically be redirected to the Web User Interface of your WIPC409HD
Visit IP Camera
If you are using Internet Explorer or a compatible browser to access the camera
for the first time you will be required to install ActiveX before viewing the video
For first time visits please click the Download ActiveX link
A dialog box as seen below will popup Click Run and it will automatically
download and install the ActiveX plugin
12
User Manual
After the ActiveX installation you will be redirected to the Home page of your IP
Camera Simply click View to start viewing
Web User Interface
Menu
There are 2 kinds of menu (1) is Main Menu and (2) is the Sub Menu The Main
Menu lies at the top of the interface including View Media Network Alarm
Advanced and System The Sub Menu lies on the right side of the Web User
Interface displaying different options for each main menu
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
4
User Manual
Network Setting Page 20
Basic Network Setting 20
WIFI Setting 21
Remote Access Setting 21
Alarm Setting Page 22
External Alarm Input 22
Motion Detection Setting 22
Alarm Mode Setting 23
Alarm Time Setting Schedule 23
Advance Setting 25
User Management 25
Auto Capture Setting 26
FTP Setting 26
E-mail Setting 27
System Setting Page 27
Device Information Checking 27
Date and Time Setting 28
Default Setting 28
System Log Checking 29
Advanced Application 30
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up 30
Mobile Phone Browsing 30
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device 31
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS) 32
Technical Parameters 33
Supplementary Section 35
Port Forwarding References 35
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2) 35
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S) 36
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME) 37
Linksys E1500 Router 38
DLink DVG-N5402SP 39
2wire 2700 HGV-2 40
5
User Manual
About the Product
The IP Camera combines a high quality digital video camera with network
connectivity and a powerful web server to bring clear videos to your mobile
phonedesktop from anywhere on your local network or over the Internet
Your IP Camera package should contain the following items If any of the listed items
are missing please contact your reseller from where you purchased the camera for
assistance
The Package includes
WIPC409HD
Resource CD Utility with
User Manual
5V Power Adapter
Easy Start Guide
LAN Cable
Wireless Antenna
Mounting Bracket
Warranty Policy
6
User Manual
Function and Features
Experience Real-Time HD monitoring anytime you need it and anywhere you are with
your smartphonersquos 3G4GWi-Fi connection through the WIPC409HDrsquos Aztech IP Cam
app a smartphone app that you can easily download on Google Play or Apple App
Store which enables you to quickly setup the WIPC409HD control the PanTiltZoom
feature of the camera and view Real-time High-definition videos and images
captured by this excellent companion
Enjoy High-Definition Monitoring To help you with your monitoring needs Aztech
WIPC409HD includes effective High-Definition video and audio recording which
allows you to view capture scenes and record video feeds with all the quality you
need
Perfectly Built for Reliability Capable of providing round the clock surveillance
WIPC409HD enables you to continuously monitor your most treasured possessions
or even your loved ones for as long as you want It is equipped with an alarm
notification which collaborates with its motion detector to identify movements
within its monitored area while sending email notifications upon detecting
movements with an attached scene-screenshot
View it Anytime Anywhere you are Anywhere you are anytime you want as long
as you have an active 3G4GWi-Fi wireless connection in your wireless device
(eg smartphones tablets laptops) controlling the WIPC409HDrsquos view and
area-viewing is now made possible
Easy 3-Step Setup Aztech WIPC409HD involves a simplified 3-step setup in setting
up the surveillance with your smartphones a feature made possible through the
Aztech IP Cam app downloadable through Apple App Store and Google Play
Enhanced Accessibility With the Aztech IP Cam app let the monitored area hear
what you have to say with its built-in speakers designed to broadcast sounds sent
by the Aztech IP Cam app You may now also easily connect your WIPC409HD to
your WPS enabled router through a simple press of the WPS button on both
devices
Pan-Tilt-Zoom Feature Compared to conventional Fixed IP Cameras which only
focuses on a single area the WIPC409HD allows you to follow movements and
capture various scenes taken from multiple angles with its 355deg horizontal and 120deg
vertical pan and tilt function which can be flexibly combined with its zoom
capabilities for the ultimate monitoring experience
7
User Manual
Appearance and Interface
Appearance
Interfaces of the WIPC409HD
1 5V DC Power Input Allows you to connect the Power Adapter Its output
should be 5V in as seen on its specifications
2 WPS Button Press this button for 2 seconds to enable the WPS connectivity of
the WIPC409HD to a wireless router that has a WPS feature You may have to
browse your routerrsquos instruction manual to know how many seconds it has to
be pressed for a successful WPS pairing
3 Ethernet Port The WIPC409HD uses a Self-adaptive Ethernet port The camera
is capable of connecting to all kinds of network devices such as hub router
switch etc
4 SD Card Slot Capable of supporting a 32G SDTF card for storing the alarm
video pictures timing snapshot and recording
5 External Mic Audio input socket is designed for connecting external
microphone or line-in audio signal Please refer to 712 and select right
settings
6 External Speaker Audio output socket is for line-out audio player such as
headphones speakers etc
8
User Manual
LAN Port LED Behaviors
Network Connection
The IP Camera can be connected to another PC by connecting it to a router a
switch or a hub to establish network connectivity as seen above
LABEL STATE DESCRIPTION
LED 1 Blinking
OFF
Actively transmittingreceiving data
Device is not connected to the network
LED 2 Steady
OFF
A LAN Cable is connected to the LAN port
There is no LAN cable connected to the LAN Port
9
User Manual
Connection Instructions
Before visiting the IP Camera you must first connect it to the Network Plug it to
a power outlet and check if the light of the LAN port is normal to make sure all
of the communication links are functioning properly The connection method
can be seen on the previous page In addition ensure that the following items
below are satisfied
1 IP Camera-1 and IP Camera-2 are connected separately to 2 different
LANs
2 And these 2 LANs are already connected to the Internet In order to get the
LANs connected to the Internet ensure that the router used in the network
has an active internet connection
3 PC-3 is connected to the Internet
Visiting the IP Camera
To visit the IP Camera you must first configure some of your IP Camerarsquos IP
settings
1 The PC and IP Camera are in the same LAN If you want to use this PC to visit
the IP Camera you need to make sure that each devicersquos IP address
belongs to the same segment Otherwise you may have to reset the IP
Camerarsquos IP address
For example if the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address in the image above is
1921681139 (at the segment of 1921681x) while the PC-1rsquos IP address is
1921680175 (at the segment of 1921680x) you will not be able to visit the
IP Camera through PC-1 You must first change the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address
to 1921680139 (or any IP address within the 19216801 to 1921680254
except 1921680175)
2 The PC and IP Camera are in different LANs but they are all connected to
Internet For the IP Camera-1 and PC-2 if you want to visit IP Camera-1
through PC-2 you must first ensure the following
Ensure that you can visit IP Camera-1 through PC-1 and then do port
forwarding of the IP Camera on Router-1
The PC-2rsquos visit application could be sent through router-1 to IP
Camera-1 Normally PC-2 could only send the information to router-1
However if you do not configure the port forwarding settings of the IP
Camera-1 on router-1 PC-2 would not be able to visit IP Camera-1
10
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from LAN
Set IP Address
The IP addresses of each IP Camera and PC should be on the same segment or
IP range As explained earlier you would not be able to access IP Camera-1
To change the IP address of IP Camera-1
1 Run the WIPC409HD Utility in the CD
2 Click Find button and then select the IP Camera on the Equipments list to set
the IP Camerarsquos IP address
Additional Notes
If a firewall is enabled in your PC a popup window will ask for your
confirmation if you would be blocking or allowing the software to run
Click Allow to proceed
IP Cameras by default use a dynamic IP Address and an HTTP port 8081 If
you do not have this software you could also press down the reset
button of the IP Camera (found at the bottom of the camera) to reset it
to its default factory settings You can then use the default IP address to
visit the IP Camera
If you wish to access the camera remotely using a camerarsquos External
Access address simply
a Select the camera that you want to access remotely on the
Equipments list
b Click the Get button (beside the External Access field)
11
User Manual
c On the Validate Authentication window enter admin as its
username and password
d Copy the URL generated on the External Access field This
link would allow you to access the camera even when not
on the same LAN Network
e You may also do steps a to d on your other IP cameras
Setup Instructions
1 Click the Find button and select the WIPC409HD camera from the Equipment
list seen on the left side of the utility The required fields on the General tab
would automatically be filled up by the selected camerarsquos device details
2 Click the Open button beside the Internal Access field and you will
automatically be redirected to the Web User Interface of your WIPC409HD
Visit IP Camera
If you are using Internet Explorer or a compatible browser to access the camera
for the first time you will be required to install ActiveX before viewing the video
For first time visits please click the Download ActiveX link
A dialog box as seen below will popup Click Run and it will automatically
download and install the ActiveX plugin
12
User Manual
After the ActiveX installation you will be redirected to the Home page of your IP
Camera Simply click View to start viewing
Web User Interface
Menu
There are 2 kinds of menu (1) is Main Menu and (2) is the Sub Menu The Main
Menu lies at the top of the interface including View Media Network Alarm
Advanced and System The Sub Menu lies on the right side of the Web User
Interface displaying different options for each main menu
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
5
User Manual
About the Product
The IP Camera combines a high quality digital video camera with network
connectivity and a powerful web server to bring clear videos to your mobile
phonedesktop from anywhere on your local network or over the Internet
Your IP Camera package should contain the following items If any of the listed items
are missing please contact your reseller from where you purchased the camera for
assistance
The Package includes
WIPC409HD
Resource CD Utility with
User Manual
5V Power Adapter
Easy Start Guide
LAN Cable
Wireless Antenna
Mounting Bracket
Warranty Policy
6
User Manual
Function and Features
Experience Real-Time HD monitoring anytime you need it and anywhere you are with
your smartphonersquos 3G4GWi-Fi connection through the WIPC409HDrsquos Aztech IP Cam
app a smartphone app that you can easily download on Google Play or Apple App
Store which enables you to quickly setup the WIPC409HD control the PanTiltZoom
feature of the camera and view Real-time High-definition videos and images
captured by this excellent companion
Enjoy High-Definition Monitoring To help you with your monitoring needs Aztech
WIPC409HD includes effective High-Definition video and audio recording which
allows you to view capture scenes and record video feeds with all the quality you
need
Perfectly Built for Reliability Capable of providing round the clock surveillance
WIPC409HD enables you to continuously monitor your most treasured possessions
or even your loved ones for as long as you want It is equipped with an alarm
notification which collaborates with its motion detector to identify movements
within its monitored area while sending email notifications upon detecting
movements with an attached scene-screenshot
View it Anytime Anywhere you are Anywhere you are anytime you want as long
as you have an active 3G4GWi-Fi wireless connection in your wireless device
(eg smartphones tablets laptops) controlling the WIPC409HDrsquos view and
area-viewing is now made possible
Easy 3-Step Setup Aztech WIPC409HD involves a simplified 3-step setup in setting
up the surveillance with your smartphones a feature made possible through the
Aztech IP Cam app downloadable through Apple App Store and Google Play
Enhanced Accessibility With the Aztech IP Cam app let the monitored area hear
what you have to say with its built-in speakers designed to broadcast sounds sent
by the Aztech IP Cam app You may now also easily connect your WIPC409HD to
your WPS enabled router through a simple press of the WPS button on both
devices
Pan-Tilt-Zoom Feature Compared to conventional Fixed IP Cameras which only
focuses on a single area the WIPC409HD allows you to follow movements and
capture various scenes taken from multiple angles with its 355deg horizontal and 120deg
vertical pan and tilt function which can be flexibly combined with its zoom
capabilities for the ultimate monitoring experience
7
User Manual
Appearance and Interface
Appearance
Interfaces of the WIPC409HD
1 5V DC Power Input Allows you to connect the Power Adapter Its output
should be 5V in as seen on its specifications
2 WPS Button Press this button for 2 seconds to enable the WPS connectivity of
the WIPC409HD to a wireless router that has a WPS feature You may have to
browse your routerrsquos instruction manual to know how many seconds it has to
be pressed for a successful WPS pairing
3 Ethernet Port The WIPC409HD uses a Self-adaptive Ethernet port The camera
is capable of connecting to all kinds of network devices such as hub router
switch etc
4 SD Card Slot Capable of supporting a 32G SDTF card for storing the alarm
video pictures timing snapshot and recording
5 External Mic Audio input socket is designed for connecting external
microphone or line-in audio signal Please refer to 712 and select right
settings
6 External Speaker Audio output socket is for line-out audio player such as
headphones speakers etc
8
User Manual
LAN Port LED Behaviors
Network Connection
The IP Camera can be connected to another PC by connecting it to a router a
switch or a hub to establish network connectivity as seen above
LABEL STATE DESCRIPTION
LED 1 Blinking
OFF
Actively transmittingreceiving data
Device is not connected to the network
LED 2 Steady
OFF
A LAN Cable is connected to the LAN port
There is no LAN cable connected to the LAN Port
9
User Manual
Connection Instructions
Before visiting the IP Camera you must first connect it to the Network Plug it to
a power outlet and check if the light of the LAN port is normal to make sure all
of the communication links are functioning properly The connection method
can be seen on the previous page In addition ensure that the following items
below are satisfied
1 IP Camera-1 and IP Camera-2 are connected separately to 2 different
LANs
2 And these 2 LANs are already connected to the Internet In order to get the
LANs connected to the Internet ensure that the router used in the network
has an active internet connection
3 PC-3 is connected to the Internet
Visiting the IP Camera
To visit the IP Camera you must first configure some of your IP Camerarsquos IP
settings
1 The PC and IP Camera are in the same LAN If you want to use this PC to visit
the IP Camera you need to make sure that each devicersquos IP address
belongs to the same segment Otherwise you may have to reset the IP
Camerarsquos IP address
For example if the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address in the image above is
1921681139 (at the segment of 1921681x) while the PC-1rsquos IP address is
1921680175 (at the segment of 1921680x) you will not be able to visit the
IP Camera through PC-1 You must first change the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address
to 1921680139 (or any IP address within the 19216801 to 1921680254
except 1921680175)
2 The PC and IP Camera are in different LANs but they are all connected to
Internet For the IP Camera-1 and PC-2 if you want to visit IP Camera-1
through PC-2 you must first ensure the following
Ensure that you can visit IP Camera-1 through PC-1 and then do port
forwarding of the IP Camera on Router-1
The PC-2rsquos visit application could be sent through router-1 to IP
Camera-1 Normally PC-2 could only send the information to router-1
However if you do not configure the port forwarding settings of the IP
Camera-1 on router-1 PC-2 would not be able to visit IP Camera-1
10
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from LAN
Set IP Address
The IP addresses of each IP Camera and PC should be on the same segment or
IP range As explained earlier you would not be able to access IP Camera-1
To change the IP address of IP Camera-1
1 Run the WIPC409HD Utility in the CD
2 Click Find button and then select the IP Camera on the Equipments list to set
the IP Camerarsquos IP address
Additional Notes
If a firewall is enabled in your PC a popup window will ask for your
confirmation if you would be blocking or allowing the software to run
Click Allow to proceed
IP Cameras by default use a dynamic IP Address and an HTTP port 8081 If
you do not have this software you could also press down the reset
button of the IP Camera (found at the bottom of the camera) to reset it
to its default factory settings You can then use the default IP address to
visit the IP Camera
If you wish to access the camera remotely using a camerarsquos External
Access address simply
a Select the camera that you want to access remotely on the
Equipments list
b Click the Get button (beside the External Access field)
11
User Manual
c On the Validate Authentication window enter admin as its
username and password
d Copy the URL generated on the External Access field This
link would allow you to access the camera even when not
on the same LAN Network
e You may also do steps a to d on your other IP cameras
Setup Instructions
1 Click the Find button and select the WIPC409HD camera from the Equipment
list seen on the left side of the utility The required fields on the General tab
would automatically be filled up by the selected camerarsquos device details
2 Click the Open button beside the Internal Access field and you will
automatically be redirected to the Web User Interface of your WIPC409HD
Visit IP Camera
If you are using Internet Explorer or a compatible browser to access the camera
for the first time you will be required to install ActiveX before viewing the video
For first time visits please click the Download ActiveX link
A dialog box as seen below will popup Click Run and it will automatically
download and install the ActiveX plugin
12
User Manual
After the ActiveX installation you will be redirected to the Home page of your IP
Camera Simply click View to start viewing
Web User Interface
Menu
There are 2 kinds of menu (1) is Main Menu and (2) is the Sub Menu The Main
Menu lies at the top of the interface including View Media Network Alarm
Advanced and System The Sub Menu lies on the right side of the Web User
Interface displaying different options for each main menu
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
6
User Manual
Function and Features
Experience Real-Time HD monitoring anytime you need it and anywhere you are with
your smartphonersquos 3G4GWi-Fi connection through the WIPC409HDrsquos Aztech IP Cam
app a smartphone app that you can easily download on Google Play or Apple App
Store which enables you to quickly setup the WIPC409HD control the PanTiltZoom
feature of the camera and view Real-time High-definition videos and images
captured by this excellent companion
Enjoy High-Definition Monitoring To help you with your monitoring needs Aztech
WIPC409HD includes effective High-Definition video and audio recording which
allows you to view capture scenes and record video feeds with all the quality you
need
Perfectly Built for Reliability Capable of providing round the clock surveillance
WIPC409HD enables you to continuously monitor your most treasured possessions
or even your loved ones for as long as you want It is equipped with an alarm
notification which collaborates with its motion detector to identify movements
within its monitored area while sending email notifications upon detecting
movements with an attached scene-screenshot
View it Anytime Anywhere you are Anywhere you are anytime you want as long
as you have an active 3G4GWi-Fi wireless connection in your wireless device
(eg smartphones tablets laptops) controlling the WIPC409HDrsquos view and
area-viewing is now made possible
Easy 3-Step Setup Aztech WIPC409HD involves a simplified 3-step setup in setting
up the surveillance with your smartphones a feature made possible through the
Aztech IP Cam app downloadable through Apple App Store and Google Play
Enhanced Accessibility With the Aztech IP Cam app let the monitored area hear
what you have to say with its built-in speakers designed to broadcast sounds sent
by the Aztech IP Cam app You may now also easily connect your WIPC409HD to
your WPS enabled router through a simple press of the WPS button on both
devices
Pan-Tilt-Zoom Feature Compared to conventional Fixed IP Cameras which only
focuses on a single area the WIPC409HD allows you to follow movements and
capture various scenes taken from multiple angles with its 355deg horizontal and 120deg
vertical pan and tilt function which can be flexibly combined with its zoom
capabilities for the ultimate monitoring experience
7
User Manual
Appearance and Interface
Appearance
Interfaces of the WIPC409HD
1 5V DC Power Input Allows you to connect the Power Adapter Its output
should be 5V in as seen on its specifications
2 WPS Button Press this button for 2 seconds to enable the WPS connectivity of
the WIPC409HD to a wireless router that has a WPS feature You may have to
browse your routerrsquos instruction manual to know how many seconds it has to
be pressed for a successful WPS pairing
3 Ethernet Port The WIPC409HD uses a Self-adaptive Ethernet port The camera
is capable of connecting to all kinds of network devices such as hub router
switch etc
4 SD Card Slot Capable of supporting a 32G SDTF card for storing the alarm
video pictures timing snapshot and recording
5 External Mic Audio input socket is designed for connecting external
microphone or line-in audio signal Please refer to 712 and select right
settings
6 External Speaker Audio output socket is for line-out audio player such as
headphones speakers etc
8
User Manual
LAN Port LED Behaviors
Network Connection
The IP Camera can be connected to another PC by connecting it to a router a
switch or a hub to establish network connectivity as seen above
LABEL STATE DESCRIPTION
LED 1 Blinking
OFF
Actively transmittingreceiving data
Device is not connected to the network
LED 2 Steady
OFF
A LAN Cable is connected to the LAN port
There is no LAN cable connected to the LAN Port
9
User Manual
Connection Instructions
Before visiting the IP Camera you must first connect it to the Network Plug it to
a power outlet and check if the light of the LAN port is normal to make sure all
of the communication links are functioning properly The connection method
can be seen on the previous page In addition ensure that the following items
below are satisfied
1 IP Camera-1 and IP Camera-2 are connected separately to 2 different
LANs
2 And these 2 LANs are already connected to the Internet In order to get the
LANs connected to the Internet ensure that the router used in the network
has an active internet connection
3 PC-3 is connected to the Internet
Visiting the IP Camera
To visit the IP Camera you must first configure some of your IP Camerarsquos IP
settings
1 The PC and IP Camera are in the same LAN If you want to use this PC to visit
the IP Camera you need to make sure that each devicersquos IP address
belongs to the same segment Otherwise you may have to reset the IP
Camerarsquos IP address
For example if the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address in the image above is
1921681139 (at the segment of 1921681x) while the PC-1rsquos IP address is
1921680175 (at the segment of 1921680x) you will not be able to visit the
IP Camera through PC-1 You must first change the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address
to 1921680139 (or any IP address within the 19216801 to 1921680254
except 1921680175)
2 The PC and IP Camera are in different LANs but they are all connected to
Internet For the IP Camera-1 and PC-2 if you want to visit IP Camera-1
through PC-2 you must first ensure the following
Ensure that you can visit IP Camera-1 through PC-1 and then do port
forwarding of the IP Camera on Router-1
The PC-2rsquos visit application could be sent through router-1 to IP
Camera-1 Normally PC-2 could only send the information to router-1
However if you do not configure the port forwarding settings of the IP
Camera-1 on router-1 PC-2 would not be able to visit IP Camera-1
10
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from LAN
Set IP Address
The IP addresses of each IP Camera and PC should be on the same segment or
IP range As explained earlier you would not be able to access IP Camera-1
To change the IP address of IP Camera-1
1 Run the WIPC409HD Utility in the CD
2 Click Find button and then select the IP Camera on the Equipments list to set
the IP Camerarsquos IP address
Additional Notes
If a firewall is enabled in your PC a popup window will ask for your
confirmation if you would be blocking or allowing the software to run
Click Allow to proceed
IP Cameras by default use a dynamic IP Address and an HTTP port 8081 If
you do not have this software you could also press down the reset
button of the IP Camera (found at the bottom of the camera) to reset it
to its default factory settings You can then use the default IP address to
visit the IP Camera
If you wish to access the camera remotely using a camerarsquos External
Access address simply
a Select the camera that you want to access remotely on the
Equipments list
b Click the Get button (beside the External Access field)
11
User Manual
c On the Validate Authentication window enter admin as its
username and password
d Copy the URL generated on the External Access field This
link would allow you to access the camera even when not
on the same LAN Network
e You may also do steps a to d on your other IP cameras
Setup Instructions
1 Click the Find button and select the WIPC409HD camera from the Equipment
list seen on the left side of the utility The required fields on the General tab
would automatically be filled up by the selected camerarsquos device details
2 Click the Open button beside the Internal Access field and you will
automatically be redirected to the Web User Interface of your WIPC409HD
Visit IP Camera
If you are using Internet Explorer or a compatible browser to access the camera
for the first time you will be required to install ActiveX before viewing the video
For first time visits please click the Download ActiveX link
A dialog box as seen below will popup Click Run and it will automatically
download and install the ActiveX plugin
12
User Manual
After the ActiveX installation you will be redirected to the Home page of your IP
Camera Simply click View to start viewing
Web User Interface
Menu
There are 2 kinds of menu (1) is Main Menu and (2) is the Sub Menu The Main
Menu lies at the top of the interface including View Media Network Alarm
Advanced and System The Sub Menu lies on the right side of the Web User
Interface displaying different options for each main menu
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
7
User Manual
Appearance and Interface
Appearance
Interfaces of the WIPC409HD
1 5V DC Power Input Allows you to connect the Power Adapter Its output
should be 5V in as seen on its specifications
2 WPS Button Press this button for 2 seconds to enable the WPS connectivity of
the WIPC409HD to a wireless router that has a WPS feature You may have to
browse your routerrsquos instruction manual to know how many seconds it has to
be pressed for a successful WPS pairing
3 Ethernet Port The WIPC409HD uses a Self-adaptive Ethernet port The camera
is capable of connecting to all kinds of network devices such as hub router
switch etc
4 SD Card Slot Capable of supporting a 32G SDTF card for storing the alarm
video pictures timing snapshot and recording
5 External Mic Audio input socket is designed for connecting external
microphone or line-in audio signal Please refer to 712 and select right
settings
6 External Speaker Audio output socket is for line-out audio player such as
headphones speakers etc
8
User Manual
LAN Port LED Behaviors
Network Connection
The IP Camera can be connected to another PC by connecting it to a router a
switch or a hub to establish network connectivity as seen above
LABEL STATE DESCRIPTION
LED 1 Blinking
OFF
Actively transmittingreceiving data
Device is not connected to the network
LED 2 Steady
OFF
A LAN Cable is connected to the LAN port
There is no LAN cable connected to the LAN Port
9
User Manual
Connection Instructions
Before visiting the IP Camera you must first connect it to the Network Plug it to
a power outlet and check if the light of the LAN port is normal to make sure all
of the communication links are functioning properly The connection method
can be seen on the previous page In addition ensure that the following items
below are satisfied
1 IP Camera-1 and IP Camera-2 are connected separately to 2 different
LANs
2 And these 2 LANs are already connected to the Internet In order to get the
LANs connected to the Internet ensure that the router used in the network
has an active internet connection
3 PC-3 is connected to the Internet
Visiting the IP Camera
To visit the IP Camera you must first configure some of your IP Camerarsquos IP
settings
1 The PC and IP Camera are in the same LAN If you want to use this PC to visit
the IP Camera you need to make sure that each devicersquos IP address
belongs to the same segment Otherwise you may have to reset the IP
Camerarsquos IP address
For example if the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address in the image above is
1921681139 (at the segment of 1921681x) while the PC-1rsquos IP address is
1921680175 (at the segment of 1921680x) you will not be able to visit the
IP Camera through PC-1 You must first change the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address
to 1921680139 (or any IP address within the 19216801 to 1921680254
except 1921680175)
2 The PC and IP Camera are in different LANs but they are all connected to
Internet For the IP Camera-1 and PC-2 if you want to visit IP Camera-1
through PC-2 you must first ensure the following
Ensure that you can visit IP Camera-1 through PC-1 and then do port
forwarding of the IP Camera on Router-1
The PC-2rsquos visit application could be sent through router-1 to IP
Camera-1 Normally PC-2 could only send the information to router-1
However if you do not configure the port forwarding settings of the IP
Camera-1 on router-1 PC-2 would not be able to visit IP Camera-1
10
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from LAN
Set IP Address
The IP addresses of each IP Camera and PC should be on the same segment or
IP range As explained earlier you would not be able to access IP Camera-1
To change the IP address of IP Camera-1
1 Run the WIPC409HD Utility in the CD
2 Click Find button and then select the IP Camera on the Equipments list to set
the IP Camerarsquos IP address
Additional Notes
If a firewall is enabled in your PC a popup window will ask for your
confirmation if you would be blocking or allowing the software to run
Click Allow to proceed
IP Cameras by default use a dynamic IP Address and an HTTP port 8081 If
you do not have this software you could also press down the reset
button of the IP Camera (found at the bottom of the camera) to reset it
to its default factory settings You can then use the default IP address to
visit the IP Camera
If you wish to access the camera remotely using a camerarsquos External
Access address simply
a Select the camera that you want to access remotely on the
Equipments list
b Click the Get button (beside the External Access field)
11
User Manual
c On the Validate Authentication window enter admin as its
username and password
d Copy the URL generated on the External Access field This
link would allow you to access the camera even when not
on the same LAN Network
e You may also do steps a to d on your other IP cameras
Setup Instructions
1 Click the Find button and select the WIPC409HD camera from the Equipment
list seen on the left side of the utility The required fields on the General tab
would automatically be filled up by the selected camerarsquos device details
2 Click the Open button beside the Internal Access field and you will
automatically be redirected to the Web User Interface of your WIPC409HD
Visit IP Camera
If you are using Internet Explorer or a compatible browser to access the camera
for the first time you will be required to install ActiveX before viewing the video
For first time visits please click the Download ActiveX link
A dialog box as seen below will popup Click Run and it will automatically
download and install the ActiveX plugin
12
User Manual
After the ActiveX installation you will be redirected to the Home page of your IP
Camera Simply click View to start viewing
Web User Interface
Menu
There are 2 kinds of menu (1) is Main Menu and (2) is the Sub Menu The Main
Menu lies at the top of the interface including View Media Network Alarm
Advanced and System The Sub Menu lies on the right side of the Web User
Interface displaying different options for each main menu
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
8
User Manual
LAN Port LED Behaviors
Network Connection
The IP Camera can be connected to another PC by connecting it to a router a
switch or a hub to establish network connectivity as seen above
LABEL STATE DESCRIPTION
LED 1 Blinking
OFF
Actively transmittingreceiving data
Device is not connected to the network
LED 2 Steady
OFF
A LAN Cable is connected to the LAN port
There is no LAN cable connected to the LAN Port
9
User Manual
Connection Instructions
Before visiting the IP Camera you must first connect it to the Network Plug it to
a power outlet and check if the light of the LAN port is normal to make sure all
of the communication links are functioning properly The connection method
can be seen on the previous page In addition ensure that the following items
below are satisfied
1 IP Camera-1 and IP Camera-2 are connected separately to 2 different
LANs
2 And these 2 LANs are already connected to the Internet In order to get the
LANs connected to the Internet ensure that the router used in the network
has an active internet connection
3 PC-3 is connected to the Internet
Visiting the IP Camera
To visit the IP Camera you must first configure some of your IP Camerarsquos IP
settings
1 The PC and IP Camera are in the same LAN If you want to use this PC to visit
the IP Camera you need to make sure that each devicersquos IP address
belongs to the same segment Otherwise you may have to reset the IP
Camerarsquos IP address
For example if the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address in the image above is
1921681139 (at the segment of 1921681x) while the PC-1rsquos IP address is
1921680175 (at the segment of 1921680x) you will not be able to visit the
IP Camera through PC-1 You must first change the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address
to 1921680139 (or any IP address within the 19216801 to 1921680254
except 1921680175)
2 The PC and IP Camera are in different LANs but they are all connected to
Internet For the IP Camera-1 and PC-2 if you want to visit IP Camera-1
through PC-2 you must first ensure the following
Ensure that you can visit IP Camera-1 through PC-1 and then do port
forwarding of the IP Camera on Router-1
The PC-2rsquos visit application could be sent through router-1 to IP
Camera-1 Normally PC-2 could only send the information to router-1
However if you do not configure the port forwarding settings of the IP
Camera-1 on router-1 PC-2 would not be able to visit IP Camera-1
10
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from LAN
Set IP Address
The IP addresses of each IP Camera and PC should be on the same segment or
IP range As explained earlier you would not be able to access IP Camera-1
To change the IP address of IP Camera-1
1 Run the WIPC409HD Utility in the CD
2 Click Find button and then select the IP Camera on the Equipments list to set
the IP Camerarsquos IP address
Additional Notes
If a firewall is enabled in your PC a popup window will ask for your
confirmation if you would be blocking or allowing the software to run
Click Allow to proceed
IP Cameras by default use a dynamic IP Address and an HTTP port 8081 If
you do not have this software you could also press down the reset
button of the IP Camera (found at the bottom of the camera) to reset it
to its default factory settings You can then use the default IP address to
visit the IP Camera
If you wish to access the camera remotely using a camerarsquos External
Access address simply
a Select the camera that you want to access remotely on the
Equipments list
b Click the Get button (beside the External Access field)
11
User Manual
c On the Validate Authentication window enter admin as its
username and password
d Copy the URL generated on the External Access field This
link would allow you to access the camera even when not
on the same LAN Network
e You may also do steps a to d on your other IP cameras
Setup Instructions
1 Click the Find button and select the WIPC409HD camera from the Equipment
list seen on the left side of the utility The required fields on the General tab
would automatically be filled up by the selected camerarsquos device details
2 Click the Open button beside the Internal Access field and you will
automatically be redirected to the Web User Interface of your WIPC409HD
Visit IP Camera
If you are using Internet Explorer or a compatible browser to access the camera
for the first time you will be required to install ActiveX before viewing the video
For first time visits please click the Download ActiveX link
A dialog box as seen below will popup Click Run and it will automatically
download and install the ActiveX plugin
12
User Manual
After the ActiveX installation you will be redirected to the Home page of your IP
Camera Simply click View to start viewing
Web User Interface
Menu
There are 2 kinds of menu (1) is Main Menu and (2) is the Sub Menu The Main
Menu lies at the top of the interface including View Media Network Alarm
Advanced and System The Sub Menu lies on the right side of the Web User
Interface displaying different options for each main menu
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
9
User Manual
Connection Instructions
Before visiting the IP Camera you must first connect it to the Network Plug it to
a power outlet and check if the light of the LAN port is normal to make sure all
of the communication links are functioning properly The connection method
can be seen on the previous page In addition ensure that the following items
below are satisfied
1 IP Camera-1 and IP Camera-2 are connected separately to 2 different
LANs
2 And these 2 LANs are already connected to the Internet In order to get the
LANs connected to the Internet ensure that the router used in the network
has an active internet connection
3 PC-3 is connected to the Internet
Visiting the IP Camera
To visit the IP Camera you must first configure some of your IP Camerarsquos IP
settings
1 The PC and IP Camera are in the same LAN If you want to use this PC to visit
the IP Camera you need to make sure that each devicersquos IP address
belongs to the same segment Otherwise you may have to reset the IP
Camerarsquos IP address
For example if the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address in the image above is
1921681139 (at the segment of 1921681x) while the PC-1rsquos IP address is
1921680175 (at the segment of 1921680x) you will not be able to visit the
IP Camera through PC-1 You must first change the IP Camera-1rsquos IP address
to 1921680139 (or any IP address within the 19216801 to 1921680254
except 1921680175)
2 The PC and IP Camera are in different LANs but they are all connected to
Internet For the IP Camera-1 and PC-2 if you want to visit IP Camera-1
through PC-2 you must first ensure the following
Ensure that you can visit IP Camera-1 through PC-1 and then do port
forwarding of the IP Camera on Router-1
The PC-2rsquos visit application could be sent through router-1 to IP
Camera-1 Normally PC-2 could only send the information to router-1
However if you do not configure the port forwarding settings of the IP
Camera-1 on router-1 PC-2 would not be able to visit IP Camera-1
10
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from LAN
Set IP Address
The IP addresses of each IP Camera and PC should be on the same segment or
IP range As explained earlier you would not be able to access IP Camera-1
To change the IP address of IP Camera-1
1 Run the WIPC409HD Utility in the CD
2 Click Find button and then select the IP Camera on the Equipments list to set
the IP Camerarsquos IP address
Additional Notes
If a firewall is enabled in your PC a popup window will ask for your
confirmation if you would be blocking or allowing the software to run
Click Allow to proceed
IP Cameras by default use a dynamic IP Address and an HTTP port 8081 If
you do not have this software you could also press down the reset
button of the IP Camera (found at the bottom of the camera) to reset it
to its default factory settings You can then use the default IP address to
visit the IP Camera
If you wish to access the camera remotely using a camerarsquos External
Access address simply
a Select the camera that you want to access remotely on the
Equipments list
b Click the Get button (beside the External Access field)
11
User Manual
c On the Validate Authentication window enter admin as its
username and password
d Copy the URL generated on the External Access field This
link would allow you to access the camera even when not
on the same LAN Network
e You may also do steps a to d on your other IP cameras
Setup Instructions
1 Click the Find button and select the WIPC409HD camera from the Equipment
list seen on the left side of the utility The required fields on the General tab
would automatically be filled up by the selected camerarsquos device details
2 Click the Open button beside the Internal Access field and you will
automatically be redirected to the Web User Interface of your WIPC409HD
Visit IP Camera
If you are using Internet Explorer or a compatible browser to access the camera
for the first time you will be required to install ActiveX before viewing the video
For first time visits please click the Download ActiveX link
A dialog box as seen below will popup Click Run and it will automatically
download and install the ActiveX plugin
12
User Manual
After the ActiveX installation you will be redirected to the Home page of your IP
Camera Simply click View to start viewing
Web User Interface
Menu
There are 2 kinds of menu (1) is Main Menu and (2) is the Sub Menu The Main
Menu lies at the top of the interface including View Media Network Alarm
Advanced and System The Sub Menu lies on the right side of the Web User
Interface displaying different options for each main menu
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
10
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from LAN
Set IP Address
The IP addresses of each IP Camera and PC should be on the same segment or
IP range As explained earlier you would not be able to access IP Camera-1
To change the IP address of IP Camera-1
1 Run the WIPC409HD Utility in the CD
2 Click Find button and then select the IP Camera on the Equipments list to set
the IP Camerarsquos IP address
Additional Notes
If a firewall is enabled in your PC a popup window will ask for your
confirmation if you would be blocking or allowing the software to run
Click Allow to proceed
IP Cameras by default use a dynamic IP Address and an HTTP port 8081 If
you do not have this software you could also press down the reset
button of the IP Camera (found at the bottom of the camera) to reset it
to its default factory settings You can then use the default IP address to
visit the IP Camera
If you wish to access the camera remotely using a camerarsquos External
Access address simply
a Select the camera that you want to access remotely on the
Equipments list
b Click the Get button (beside the External Access field)
11
User Manual
c On the Validate Authentication window enter admin as its
username and password
d Copy the URL generated on the External Access field This
link would allow you to access the camera even when not
on the same LAN Network
e You may also do steps a to d on your other IP cameras
Setup Instructions
1 Click the Find button and select the WIPC409HD camera from the Equipment
list seen on the left side of the utility The required fields on the General tab
would automatically be filled up by the selected camerarsquos device details
2 Click the Open button beside the Internal Access field and you will
automatically be redirected to the Web User Interface of your WIPC409HD
Visit IP Camera
If you are using Internet Explorer or a compatible browser to access the camera
for the first time you will be required to install ActiveX before viewing the video
For first time visits please click the Download ActiveX link
A dialog box as seen below will popup Click Run and it will automatically
download and install the ActiveX plugin
12
User Manual
After the ActiveX installation you will be redirected to the Home page of your IP
Camera Simply click View to start viewing
Web User Interface
Menu
There are 2 kinds of menu (1) is Main Menu and (2) is the Sub Menu The Main
Menu lies at the top of the interface including View Media Network Alarm
Advanced and System The Sub Menu lies on the right side of the Web User
Interface displaying different options for each main menu
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
11
User Manual
c On the Validate Authentication window enter admin as its
username and password
d Copy the URL generated on the External Access field This
link would allow you to access the camera even when not
on the same LAN Network
e You may also do steps a to d on your other IP cameras
Setup Instructions
1 Click the Find button and select the WIPC409HD camera from the Equipment
list seen on the left side of the utility The required fields on the General tab
would automatically be filled up by the selected camerarsquos device details
2 Click the Open button beside the Internal Access field and you will
automatically be redirected to the Web User Interface of your WIPC409HD
Visit IP Camera
If you are using Internet Explorer or a compatible browser to access the camera
for the first time you will be required to install ActiveX before viewing the video
For first time visits please click the Download ActiveX link
A dialog box as seen below will popup Click Run and it will automatically
download and install the ActiveX plugin
12
User Manual
After the ActiveX installation you will be redirected to the Home page of your IP
Camera Simply click View to start viewing
Web User Interface
Menu
There are 2 kinds of menu (1) is Main Menu and (2) is the Sub Menu The Main
Menu lies at the top of the interface including View Media Network Alarm
Advanced and System The Sub Menu lies on the right side of the Web User
Interface displaying different options for each main menu
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
12
User Manual
After the ActiveX installation you will be redirected to the Home page of your IP
Camera Simply click View to start viewing
Web User Interface
Menu
There are 2 kinds of menu (1) is Main Menu and (2) is the Sub Menu The Main
Menu lies at the top of the interface including View Media Network Alarm
Advanced and System The Sub Menu lies on the right side of the Web User
Interface displaying different options for each main menu
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
13
User Manual
Video Displaying Area
The video displaying area corresponds to the resolution of the IP Camera The
higher the resolution is the larger the displayed area will be If the motion
detection feature is enabled the displaying area will show a pane calling the
userrsquos attention if movements were detected on the surveillance area
1 Displays Connection Status Displays the current status of the IP camera
2 Record Status If you click the Record button on the submenu the record
status will show Rec to show that the current video is being recorded Clicking
the Record button again will stop the recording
3 Zoom Out Button Zooms out of the previewed area
4 Zoom In Button Zooms in on the previewed area
5 File Saving Path Setting Allows you to browse a file saving path where the IP
Camera will save the recorded videos and snapshots
6 Talk-back Button Allows you to do an audio broadcast through the IP
Camerarsquos built-in speaker or an external speaker connected to the camera
7 Audio Play Button Allows you to play audio from the monitored area
Browse SD Card
When an SD Card is inserted click the submenu the pop-up page will display
the content of the SD Card similar to the directory below
In the figure above the text inside the [ ] is the catalog info Click sub catalog to
browse the recorded images and videos The images will be displayed when you
click them and the videos will be downloaded and played by the video player
in your computer automatically
Additional Notes
Insert SD Card first before turning ON the IP Camera
Proper SD Card Placement ndash metal contacts facing on top
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
14
User Manual
Capture
Allows you to take photos of the current video and store the image at the present
path
Record
Allows you to record videos with audio and store it using the present path When
recording there will be an indicated symbol in the status of video display area to
show you it is recording Click the ldquoRecordrdquo button again to stop recording
Playback
Allows you to play videos that you have recorded Upon clicking the ldquoPlaybackrdquo
button a popup player which could play the video stored on your PC disk will
appear
These buttons are (1) play (2) stop (3) Previous recorded video (4) Next
recorded video and (5) open a Recorded video Please click the button of open
the recorder file first and select the file you want to play
The PanTilt Control
The PanTilt control area allows you to control the cruise of the PanTilt of your IP
Camera through directional arrow buttons
(UpDownLeftRightCentreStopLeft-right cruiseUp-down cruise)
When the IP Camera turns to some position you can click the Set Button When
you continue to control the Pantilt to turn to other position you could click the
Call button and the PanTilt will go back to its pre-position
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
15
User Manual
Notice (for Initial Use)
Please change the following settings for initial use
1 You may have to change the initial passwords of admin user and guest Their
initial passwords are respectively ldquoadminrdquo ldquouserrdquo ldquoguestrdquo
2 You may also have to set the current System Time
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
16
User Manual
Visit IP Camera from WAN
Port Forwarding
Ensure PC-1 can visit IP Camera-1 Before the computers in WAN (PC-2 PC-3)
can visit IP Camera-1 you must first put the IP Camera -1 into WAN You can set
Port Forwarding on Router-1 to put IP Camera-1 into WAN
1 Open the Router Setting interface on PC-1 The interfaces for different routers
are different and the Port Forwarding settings are different
NOTE You may have to refer to your routerrsquos user manual to finish this part
2 For most routers the Port Forwarding option can be found under Setting
Firewall Interface Fill in the IP address and Port of IP Camera-1 into the
corresponding blank
3 Select Status option and remember the WAN IP address
4 Enter the IP address in the browser of PC-1 If IP Camera-1 can be visited via
PC-1 the port forwarding is successful PC-2 and PC-3 should now also be
able to access IP Camera-1
Additional Notes
The WAN IP address is allocated by your ISP Ensure that it is an available WAN
IP address Since the WAN IP address may lack many WAN IP address are
available within a limited area If PC-2 and PC-3 are not in this area these
devices would not be able to access the IP camera
If a User wants to put several IP Cameras into WAN every device should have
Port Forwarding set In order to distinguish these devices each device should
be assigned on a different port If the port of the device is not 8081 you
would have to add the port to the IP address separated by a colon ()
whenever you will be accessing the IP Camera (eg http202968217781)
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
17
User Manual
DDNS
As explained earlier Router-1 will get the WAN IP address via ADSL The WAN IP
address constantly changes which is why the IP address cannot be confirmed
In instances such as this the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) would be of
great use IP Camera-1 will update its IP configuration to the DDNS at regular intervals
The DDNS would then recognize the WAN IP address of the Router-1 which is
connected to IP Camera-1
The WAN IP address can be searched on DDNS by its domain name (eg
Aztechcamera1com) The domain name will serve as the substitute of the dynamic
IP address If the device cannot be visited through its IP address the domain name
would also be unavailable
Manufacturerrsquos Domain Name
Device manufacturer has established a DDNS and allotted a dynamic domain
name to every device The domain name has been integrated into devices
during production For example if you enter the domain name seen below your
web browser will connect the device and display the IP address
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
18
User Manual
Additional Notes
The domain name is made possible through port forwarding The domain
name will change into the IP address and port number of the device when
visited through its domain name
If the device can be visited by IP address but canrsquot be visited by
manufacturerrsquos domain name please check the DNS info if it is available or
not and make sure that the DNS setting is the same with the DNS setting of PC
in LAN
Third Party Domain Name
You may also use other third party DDNS such as www3322org You may apply
for a free domain name from this website All you have to do is to correctly enter
the information required and the domain name can now be used
The domain name will be displayed in the web browser whenever you are visiting
the IP Camera However if the port is not 80 the port number should be added
after the domain name and colon Example httpipcam3322org81
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
19
User Manual
Other Settings
Video Settings Page
Video Settings
Resolution Use 1280 X 720 Resolution Bit Rate is 2048 kbps and Frame
Rate is up to 30 fps The higher the resolution or quality of the picture the
higher bit rate requirement and bandwidth consumption will be A high
bit rate allows the generation of higher image qualities
NOTE In setting the frame rate bandwidth must be taken into
consideration With a low bandwidth a high frame rate would result into
uneven results With limited bandwidths it is suggested to set the frame
rate to 15fps High bandwidth limits can set the frame rates to its highest
setting
Overlay Options Through this setting you can add the Time and
Camera Name to the images captured by your IP Camera
Audio Settings
Audio Options Allows you to define values for input and output volume
(with 100 being the highest value)
First Stream Allows you to enable or disable the audio capture function
and select the audio type which best suits your bandwidth limit
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
20
User Manual
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Allows you to adjust brightness saturation and contrast
by either sliding the glide bars of the corresponding setting or by entering
the value that you wish on the corresponding setting
Image Display Adjustment Allows you to set the monitored arearsquos vide view
into Mirror or Flip
IR LED Control and Night vision mode Allows you to enable or disable IP
Camera features which are useful in either night time or insufficiently
lighted areas These are suggested to be set to AUTO and turned ON at
all times
Network Setting Page
Basic Network Setting
LAN Setting The default LAN settings are set to Dynamic with its DNS
Configuration type set to DHCP
HTTP Port Allows you to specify a port the IP Camera will use in
transferring the data going to the web server
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
21
User Manual
WIFI Setting
The wireless settings page is as shown above You can click the ldquoSearchrdquo button
and it will show you a list of WIFI networks detected By selecting one SSID all
data fields will be filled up automatically (eg SSID encryption algorithm etc)
All you have to do is to enter the wireless password in the Key and the Re-Type
Key field correctly Click the Check button to check if the parameters entered
are correct You may then click the Apply button to apply the settings
Note Before you set up wireless parameters ensure that the device is
connected to the Internet After connecting successfully reboot the device for
the wireless settings to take effect Upon rebooting the device it will take 30
seconds before the camera will automatically pan and tilt by itself Another (2)
minutes is needed for the camera to successfully establish a wireless connection
to the router
Remote Access Setting
Manufacturerrsquos DDNS and Third Party Dynamic DNS Please refer to the
content of the part DDNS
UPNP UPNP stands for universal plug and play If you enabled UPNP once the
IP camera is connected into the LAN it will communicate with the router of
the LAN It will request the router to open a port to forward its own port
NOTE Before using UPNP function please ensure that the routerrsquos UPNP has
also been enabled It is also important to know that some routers do not
support a UPNP feature If it does not have the said feature it is suggested to
set a Port Forwarding Function on your router
WAN IP Test Click the ldquoShowrdquo button it will show you another page displaying
the WAN IP address when it is connected to the Internet
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
22
User Manual
Alarm Setting Page
External Alarm Input
If the alarm input pins have been connected with an alarm detector please tick
the ldquoExternal Alarmrdquo and then you will have enabled external alarm function If
the external alarm detector is open mode please tick Open vice versa
Motion Detection Setting
Allows you to monitor movements made on the monitored area Four area
frames can be enableddisabled managed resized and distributed across the
monitored area window Movements detected within each window would be
able to trigger an alarm Detection sensitivity settings for each corresponding
area window can also be configured in this area
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
23
User Manual
Alarm Mode Setting
Allows you to set how the IP Camera will respond when the alarm is triggered
You can set it to any of the responses enumerated below
Snapshot a live picture of the site on the SD card
Record a 30-second video on the SD card (including 5 seconds long video
before the alarm was triggered)
Send the recorded video on the SD card to the FTP server (You would have
to enable ldquoSave the video on SD cardrdquo function and ensure that an SD
card is inserted first)
Enable external alarm function and set the time
Send alarm info to the alarm server
Send alarm info to E-mail
Alarm Time Setting Schedule
NOTE You may need to adjust the system time first before you can fully utilize this
area
Example below Alarm set is Monday Wednesday Friday at 3PM to 600PM
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
24
User Manual
0 - 23 denotes standard format of time (24 hour clock)
Left box indicates first 30 minutes half hour ( 0001 ndash 0030)
Right box indicates last 30 minutes half hour (0031-0100)
NOTE The IP Camera will trigger alarm only on the time set
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
25
User Manual
Advance Setting
User Management
There are three account levels of authorization Admin User and Guest
The Admin account has the highest authority and can perform all possible
changes on the IP Camerarsquos settings
The User account can only operate the IP camera but it cannot do any
changes to its current settings
The Guest account can only watch videos
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
26
User Manual
Auto Capture Setting
Allows you to configure the Auto capture settings of your IP Camera such as the
SD CardFTP second intervals and the enablingdisabling of image saving in SD
CardFTP Server
By ticking the ldquosave picture on the SD cardrdquo checkbox the IP Camera will take a
snapshot of the monitored area using the interval declared on the TFSD Card
field (eg every 60 seconds)
FTP Setting
In order to use FTP function you should first set a valid username and password of
your FTP Server Storage and the authority to write and create sub-category into
it is also required for the FTP Auto Capture Setting to work
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
27
User Manual
E-mail Setting
Allows you to configure the email settings which will be used if the alarm
response is set to email alarm As seen below the blanks which have been filled
with info should be correct If any info is not filled properly the setting will fail
Before setting these parameters please refer to the settings of your Outlook
Express
System Setting Page
Device Information Checking
Displays your IP Camerarsquos basic device properties such as its current connection
status its MAC address the Subnet Mask and its default gateway the primary
and secondary DNS the running duration time and the SD Card status
NOTE The device supports a maximum of 32G SD card Please format the SD
card to FAT32 before using the card on Camera Please check if the SD Card
matches the camera or not before purchasing the SD Card
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
28
User Manual
Date and Time Setting
Allows you to identify the NTP Server the IP Camera will synch with There are
three options in setting your IP Camerarsquos time and date (1) manually (2)
keeping the same time and date settings of your computer and (3) is getting it
from the NTP server
Default Setting
Reboot Allows you to restart the device The device reboot will take less than
five minutes to complete
Restore Factory Default Allows you to restart the IP Camera using all of the
default settings it has By clicking the Confirm button all changes made on
the IP camera will be replaced by its default settings
Backup Settings Data Allows you to backup all present settings in your IP
Camera
Restore Settings Data Allows you to use the previously saved backup file that
you saved Simply click the browse button locate the backup file and click
confirm
Firmware Upgrade Allows you to upgrade the current firmware of your IP
Camera Simply click the browse button locate the firmware file and click
confirm After the upgrade the IP Camera will restart with the upgraded
firmware loaded
NOTE It is important to ONLY use firmware OFFICIALLY RELEASED by Aztech
These can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Site
(wwwaztechcomsupport)
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
29
User Manual
System Log Checking
Displays the current activities made in your IP Camera such as logins and
logouts of various devices and other device oriented activities
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
30
User Manual
Advanced Application
Android and iPhone Mobile Application Set Up
1 Download and Install Aztech IP Cam App at Google Play Store or
iTunesAppStore You may scan the QR Code found at the Packaging Box to
automatically search for the app
2 Click Add Camera
3 Enter the UID This information is found at the bottom label of the Camera You
may scan the UIDrsquos QR Code or Search the Camera from the Local Area
Network The UID is unique for every device
4 Enter the Security CodePassword The Default Password is admin then Click
OKSave to view the Camera
5 You may also edit the Camerarsquos Settings click Edit Camera and then go to
the Advanced Setting to change the Security Code Video Setting and Wi-Fi
Setting
6 It is highly recommended to change the Security Code during Initial Set Up
Click on Modify Security Code type the Old Password then Enter the New
Password
7 To connect your camera via Wireless Setting click on Wi-Fi Setting then go to
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
8 You may select on which wireless network to connect then key-in its
Password
9 After a successful connection you may now disconnect the LAN Cable from
your camera and do a power reboot on the device
NOTE For screenshot details please refer to Easy Start Guide copy included in
the Package Please note that a maximum of eight (8) IP Cameras can be
added in the Mobile App
Mobile Phone Browsing
After connecting to the network you can view the IP Camerarsquos monitored area
through its mobile phone The device will then send MJPEG picture to the mobile
phone using the image resolution preferred (mentioned on Chapter 711)
Viewing ways are found below
1） httpIPPortmobilehtml for example
http5861541771025mobilehtml
httptest3322org1025mobilehtml
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
31
User Manual
Smartphone (like iPhone and Android etc) can use this Mode to visit the IP
Camera If your device is unable to visit the IP Camera you have to
download and use an opera mobile browser
2） httpIPPort for example
http5861541771025
httptest3322org1025
Only iPhone can use this mode to visit
Using Other Web Browsers to visit the device
Using a web browser with IE kernel you must first download ActiveX Using other web
browser like Safari or Firefox it will use QuickTime to play
A The settings to use Firefox or Safari in Windows OS
To view videos on Firefox and Safari
1 In Windows OS it will remind the users for the installation of Quicktime
After installation start the Quicktime program
2 Access the QuickTime Preferences dialog box from Edit Menu
3 Click Advanced then select ldquocustomrdquo in the Transport Setup A
Streaming Transport dialog box will popup
4 Select ldquoHTTPrdquo for transport protocol and ldquo80rdquo as its port ID then click
ldquookrdquo
5 Please be back to Transport Setup to change ldquoCustomrdquo to ldquoAutordquo
6 Click ldquookrdquo at the bottom You can now view videos through Firefox or
Safari now
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
32
User Manual
B The Settings to Use Safari in MAC OS
When using MAC OS since QuickTime is the default software you only
need to go to the Utilities folder under the Applications folder start
command line program (Terminal program) and input the command
below
qtdefaults write TransportSettings HTTP 8081
You can now open this in Safari to view the camera If you canrsquot view the IP
Camera from safari please try httpipportmobilehtml
Multiple Device Monitor System (MDMS)
Multi Device Monitor System is a free software offered in conjunction with the
WIPC409HD which allows several IP Cameras on the LAN and WAN to be
browsed at the same time The software also supports snapshots video
recording and so on
NOTE The MDMS Software can be downloaded on the Aztech Support Website
(wwwAztechcomsupport)
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
33
User Manual
Technical Parameters
CPU Operating
System Embedded Linux OS
Processor 32Bit RSIC Embedded Processor
Network Network
Interface
RJ45 10100MB Self-Adaptable
Ethernet slot
Protocol HTTPUDPSMTPFTPDHCP
DNSDDNSNTPUPNP
Wireless 80211 bgn
IP mode Dynamic IP address Static IP address
Video Online Visitor Support 5 visitors at the same time
Compression
Format H264
Image Sensor CMOS 1000000 pixel
Lens 36mm
Frame Rate 1～25 fps(50HZ)1～30 fps(60HZ)
Resolution Triple stream (1280720) (640360) (320180)
Image
Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue
WB BLC Auto
LUX 04LUXF20
SNR gt48dB
Audio Compression
Format G711G726
Input Built-in microphone 1audio jack input
Output Build-in speaker 1audio jack output
PanTilt
Zoom
Motor Built-in motor
Rotation
Angle Horizontal355degvertical 120deg
Preset 8
Night
Vision
Filter
Switch
IR cut filter auto-switch automatically
Genuine Color
Night Vision 8PCS Φ5 LED lights IR distance 10m
Alarm Alarm
Detection Motion Detection
Detection
Area Support 4 Detection Areas
Alarm
Notification
Email Snapshot Notification FTP Snapshot Upload
Event record to TF card
Others Shape Plastic（ABS）
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
34
User Manual
Material
Environment indoors
Power Supply DC5V 2A
Operating
Temperature -10～+50degC
Operating
Humidity 10～80
Dimension Item size 112x90x116mm (LWH)
Package size 200x150x120mm (LWH)
Weight Item weight275g
Package weight580g
Accessories Power Adapter Easy Start Guide Screws
Mounting Bracket
System System
Requirements
Microsoft Win XPVista Win7Win8
IE60708090 100
Certification Certificate ISO FCC CE RoHS
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
35
User Manual
Supplementary Section
Port Forwarding References
This section provides procedure in setting the Port Forwarding Function of your
router Please take note that the IP Camera must be connected to the Router
and the Internet Connection is up After it has been configured successfully user
may now be able to access the IP Camera remotely using another computer
Aztech DSL1015EW(S) DSL1016EN(S2)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
36
User Manual
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GRV(S)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
37
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Aztech DSL7000GR(SME)
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Go to Firewall Configuration click Port Forwarding
4 Select Server Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate or select Custom Server if you enter the name
manually
5 Enter the Server IP address of the computer on your local network that
you want to allow the incoming service
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that
you want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in
both boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For Internal Port Start and Internal Port End enter the port of ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
9 Click SaveApply
Note Remaining numbers of entries that can be configured is up to 32
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
38
User Manual
To Remove
1 Select the Server Name by clicking on Remove check box
2 Click Remove button
Linksys E1500 Router
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216811 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Applications amp Gaming click Single Port Forwarding
5 Select Application Name if application is available in one of the option and
fields will auto-populate Select HTTP
6 For External Port Start and External Port End enter the port or ports that you
want to open If you want to open one port enter the same port in both
boxes
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 Tick Enabled to activate the setting
10 Click Save Settings
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
39
User Manual
DLink DVG-N5402SP
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 19216801 on the address bar and then press Enter
3 Type correct Username and Password if required
4 Go to Advanced Tab click Firewall and DMZ at the left column
5 Under Port Filtering Select WAN Connection (Internet)
6 For WAN Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
7 For Protocol select TCP
8 For LAN Host IP Address input the IP Address of your camera
9 For Server Port Range enter the port or ports that you want to open If you
want to open one port enter the same port in both boxes (8081)
10 Enter Name in the Remarks
11 Click Apply to save settings
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
40
User Manual
2wire 2700 HGV-2
1 Open your browser
2 Type-in 1921681254 on the address bar and then press Enter to enter the
Web User Interface Page of your router
3 Click Connection Status this will launch the configuration page
4 Select Home Network tab then click Edit Firewall Settings Take note of the
WIPC409HD Wired Connection Icon
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
41
User Manual
5 Click Allow Individual Application (s) and select User-Defined from the drop
down box then click Add a new user-defined application
6 On the Application Name box input the IP Camerarsquos Name select TCP on the
Protocol option Input 8081 under the Port (or Range) field then click ADD
DEFINITION
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
42
User Manual
7 WIPC409HD IP Camera Configuration will be added on the Definition List
Table Click Back to return to the Firewall Settings
8 Click Home Network again then click Edit Firewall Settings on the WIPC409HD
Wired Connection
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
43
User Manual
9 Under the All Application box select WIPC409HD then click ADD for the
application to be added on the Hosted Application list Click DONE for the
settings to take effect
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
44
User Manual
Copyright copy 2014 Aztech Technologies Pte Ltd (CRN199800635M) All rights reserved
